blob: 6717be15db99fa6aa80b6e931d347d4cf6e82ad9 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
17#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000025#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000026#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000038#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000040#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000042#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000043#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000048#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000049#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000050#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000051using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000052using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000053
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000054#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
55
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000056// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
57// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
58// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
59// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000060static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000061PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
62 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000063
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000064static cl::opt<bool>
65DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
66 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
67
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000068static cl::opt<bool>
69SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
70 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
71
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000072static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
73 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
74 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000075
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000076STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000077STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000078STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000079STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +000080STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000081STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000082STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000083
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000084namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000085 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
86 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the cases
87 // composing the case group.
88 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
89 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
90 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
91 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the switch
92 // for that PHI.
93 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
94
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000095 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
96 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
97 ConstantInt *Value;
98 BasicBlock *Dest;
99
100 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
101 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
102
103 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
104 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
105 return Value < RHS.Value;
106 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000107
108 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000109 };
110
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000111class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000112 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000113 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000114 const DataLayout *const DL;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000115 AssumptionCache *AC;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000116 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
117 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000118 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000119 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000120 BasicBlock *Pred,
121 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000122 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
123 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000124
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000125 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000126 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000127 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000128 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000129 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000130 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000131 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000132
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000133public:
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000134 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000135 const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionCache *AC)
136 : TTI(TTI), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), DL(DL), AC(AC) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000137 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
138};
139}
140
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000141/// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two
142/// terminator instructions together.
143///
144static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
145 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000146
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000147 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
148 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
149 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
150 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
151 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000152 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000153
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000154 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
155 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000157 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
158 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
159 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
160 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
161 return false;
162 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000163
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000164 return true;
165}
166
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000167/// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable
168/// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an
169/// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common
170/// successors.
171///
172static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
173 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000174 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000175 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
176 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
177 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
178
179 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000181 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
182 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
183 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
184 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
185 if (!Ci2) return false;
186 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
187 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
188 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
189 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
190 return false;
191
192 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
193 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
194 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000195 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
196 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
197 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000198 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
199 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
200 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000201 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000202 return false;
203 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
204 }
205 return true;
206}
207
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000208/// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will
209/// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be
210/// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from
211/// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ.
212static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
213 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000214 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000215
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000216 PHINode *PN;
217 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
218 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
219 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000220}
221
David Majnemer91142c42013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000222/// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000223/// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means
224/// cheap, TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
225/// expensive.
226static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I, const DataLayout *DL,
227 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000228 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000229 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000230 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000231}
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000232/// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as
233/// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
234/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
235/// which works well enough for us.
236///
237/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000238/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
239/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
240/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
241/// set and true is returned.
242///
243/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
244/// Select whose cost is 2.
245///
246/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
247/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
248/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000249static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000250 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000251 unsigned &CostRemaining,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000252 const DataLayout *DL,
253 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000254 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000255 if (!I) {
256 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
257 // can be executed unconditionally.
258 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
259 if (C->canTrap())
260 return false;
261 return true;
262 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000263 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000264
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000265 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000266 // the bottom of this block.
267 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000268
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000269 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
270 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000271 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
272 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000273 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000274 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000275
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000276 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
277 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000278 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000279
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000280 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
281 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
282
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000283 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
284 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
285 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000286 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000287 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000288
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000289 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, DL, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000290
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000291 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
292 return false;
293
294 CostRemaining -= Cost;
295
296 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
297 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000298 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000299 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, DL, TTI))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000300 return false;
301 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
302 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000303 return true;
304}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000305
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000306/// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
307/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000308static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout *DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000309 // Normal constant int.
310 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000311 if (CI || !DL || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000312 return CI;
313
314 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
315 // ConstantInt if possible.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000316 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL->getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000317
318 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
319 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
320 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
321
322 // IntToPtr const int.
323 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
324 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
325 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
326 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
327 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
328 return CI;
329 else
330 return cast<ConstantInt>
331 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
332 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000333 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000334}
335
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000336namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000337
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000338/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
339/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
340/// structure.
341/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
342/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
343/// representing the different cases for the switch.
344/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
345/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
346/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
347/// fail.
348struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000349
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000350 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
351 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
352 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
353 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000354
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000355 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
356 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout *DL)
357 : CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
358 gather(Cond, DL);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000359 }
360
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000361 /// Prevent copy
362 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &)
363 LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
364 ConstantComparesGatherer &
365 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000366
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000367private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000368
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000369 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
370 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
371 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
372 if(CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
373 CompValue = NewVal;
374 return (CompValue != nullptr);
375 }
376
377 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
378 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
379 /// match depending on isEQ).
380 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
381 /// against is placed in CompValue.
382 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
383 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
384 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, const DataLayout *DL, bool isEQ) {
385 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
386 ICmpInst *ICI;
387 ConstantInt *C;
388 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
389 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
390 return false;
391 }
392
393 Value *RHSVal;
394 ConstantInt *RHSC;
395
396 // Pattern match a special case
397 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
398 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
399 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
400 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
401 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
402 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
403 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
404 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
405 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
406 return false;
407
408 Vals.push_back(C);
409 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
410 C->getValue() | Not));
411 UsedICmps++;
412 return true;
413 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000414 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415
416 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
417 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
418 return false;
419
420 UsedICmps++;
421 Vals.push_back(C);
422 return ICI->getOperand(0);
423 }
424
425 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
426 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(),
427 C->getValue());
428
429 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
430 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
431 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
432 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
433 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
434 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
435 }
436
437 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
438 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
439 // x != 0 && x != 1.
440 if (!isEQ)
441 Span = Span.inverse();
442
443 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
444 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
445 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000446 }
447
448 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
450 return false;
451
452 // Add all values from the range to the set
453 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
454 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000455
456 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000457 return true;
458
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000459 }
460
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 /// gather - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
462 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
463 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
464 /// vector.
465 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
466 void gather(Value *V, const DataLayout *DL) {
467 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
468 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000469
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
471 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000472
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000473 // Initialize
474 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000475
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000476 while(!DFT.empty()) {
477 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000478
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000479 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
480 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
481 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
482 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
483 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
484 continue;
485 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000486
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487 // Try to match the current instruction
488 if (matchInstruction(I, DL, isEQ))
489 // Match succeed, continue the loop
490 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000491 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000492
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000493 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
494 // comparison against the same value as the others.
495 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
496 if (!Extra) {
497 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000498 continue;
499 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000500 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
501 CompValue = nullptr;
502 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000503 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000504 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000505};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000506
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000507}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000508
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000509static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000510 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000511 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
512 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
513 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
514 if (BI->isConditional())
515 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000516 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
517 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000518 }
519
520 TI->eraseFromParent();
521 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
522}
523
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000524/// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks
525/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000526Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000527 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000528 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
529 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
530 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000531 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
532 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
533 CV = SI->getCondition();
534 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000535 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000536 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000537 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000538 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
539
540 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000541 if (DL && CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000542 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
543 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000544 if (PTII->getType() == DL->getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000545 CV = Ptr;
546 }
547 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000548 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000549}
550
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000551/// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction,
552/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000553BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000554GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000555 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
556 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000557 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000558 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
559 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
560 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
561 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000562 return SI->getDefaultDest();
563 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000564
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000565 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000566 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000567 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
568 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000569 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000570 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000571 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000572}
573
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000574
575/// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
576/// in the list that match the specified block.
577static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
578 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000579 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000580}
581
582/// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as
583/// well.
584static bool
585ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
586 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
587 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
588
589 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
590 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
591 std::swap(V1, V2);
592
593 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
594 if (V1->size() == 1) {
595 // Just scan V2.
596 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
597 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
598 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
599 return true;
600 }
601
602 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
603 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
604 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
605 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
606 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
607 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
608 return true;
609 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
610 ++i1;
611 else
612 ++i2;
613 }
614 return false;
615}
616
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000617/// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a
618/// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single
619/// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value
620/// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the
621/// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited
622/// form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000623bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
624SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000625 BasicBlock *Pred,
626 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000627 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
628 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
629
630 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
631 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
632 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
633
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000634 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
635 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
636
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000637 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000638 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000639 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
640 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000641 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000642
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000643 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000644 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000645 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000646 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000647
648 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
649 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
650 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
651 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
652 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
653 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000654 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000655 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000656
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000657 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
658 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
659 // uncond br.
660 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
661 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000662 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000663 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000664
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000665 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000666 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000667
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000668 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
669 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000670
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000671 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
672 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000673 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000674
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000675 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
676 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000677 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
678 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
679 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000680
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000681 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000682 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000683
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000684 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
685 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000686 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000687 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
688 if (HasWeight)
689 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
690 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000691 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000692 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
693 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000694 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
695 --i;
696 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000697 if (HasWeight) {
698 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
699 Weights.pop_back();
700 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000701 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
702 SI->removeCase(i);
703 }
704 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000705 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000706 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
707 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
708 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000709
710 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000711 return true;
712 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000713
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000714 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
715 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000716 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000717 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000718 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
719 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000720 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000721 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
722 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
723 }
724 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000725
726 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
727 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000728 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000729 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
730 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
731 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
732 break;
733 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000734
735 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000736 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000737
738 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
739 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000740 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
741 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
742 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000743 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000744 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000745
746 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000747 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000748 (void) NI;
749
750 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
751 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
752
753 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
754 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000755}
756
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000757namespace {
758 /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant
759 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
760 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
761 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
762 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
763 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
764 }
765 };
766}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000767
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000768static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
769 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
770 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
771 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000772 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
773 return 1;
774 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
775 return 0;
776 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000777}
778
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000779static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000780 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000781 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
782 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
783 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
784
785 return false;
786}
787
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000788/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
789/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
790/// metadata.
791static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
792 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000793 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000794 assert(MD);
795 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000796 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000797 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000798 }
799
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000800 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
801 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
802 // default weight to be the first entry.
803 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
804 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
805 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
806 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
807 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000808 }
809}
810
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000811/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000812static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000813 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
814 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
815 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
816 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
817 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000818 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000819}
820
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000821/// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value
822/// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
823/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
824/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000825bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
826 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000827 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
828 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
829 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
830 bool Changed = false;
831
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000832 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000833 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000834 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000835
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000836 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
837 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
838 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
839
840 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
841 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000842 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000843 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
844
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000846 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
847
848 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
849 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
850 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000851 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000852
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000853 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
854 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000855 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
856 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
857
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000858 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000859 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000860 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000861 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
862 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
863 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000864 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
865 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
866 // successor's weights
867 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000868
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000869 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000870 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000871 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000872 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000873 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
874 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
875 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000876 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000877
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000878 if (PredDefault == BB) {
879 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
880 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000881 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
882 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
883 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
884 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
885 else {
886 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
887 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000888
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000889 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
890 // Increase weight for the default case.
891 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000892 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
893 Weights.pop_back();
894 }
895
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000896 PredCases.pop_back();
897 --i; --e;
898 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000899
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000900 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000901 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
902 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
903 PredDefault = BBDefault;
904 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
905 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000906
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000907 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
908 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000909 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
910 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
911 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
912 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
913 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
915 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
916 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
917 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
918 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
919 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000920 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000921 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000922
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000923 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
924 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
925 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
926 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
927 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
928 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
929 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
930 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000931 } else {
932 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
933 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
934 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000935 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000936 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000937 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
938 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
939 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000940
941 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
942 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
943 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
944 Weights.pop_back();
945 }
946
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000947 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
948 PredCases.pop_back();
949 --i; --e;
950 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000951
952 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
953 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000954 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
955 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
956 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000957 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
958 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
960 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
961 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
962 }
963
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000964 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
965 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000966 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000967 PTIHandled.begin(),
968 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000969 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
970 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000971 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000972 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000973 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000974 }
975
976 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
977 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
978 // successors.
979 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i)
980 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB);
981
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000982 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000983 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000984 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000985 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
986 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL->getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000987 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000988 }
989
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000990 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000991 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
992 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000993 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000994 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
995 NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000996
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000997 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
998 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
999 FitWeights(Weights);
1000
1001 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1002
1003 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1004 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1005 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1006 }
1007
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001008 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001009
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1011 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1012 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001013 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1015 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001016 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001017 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001018 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001019 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1020 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001021 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001022 }
1023 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1024 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001025
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001026 Changed = true;
1027 }
1028 }
1029 return Changed;
1030}
1031
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001032// isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the
1033// value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we
1034// would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere
1035// to put the select in this case.
1036static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1037 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001038 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001039 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001040 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001041 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1042 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1043 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1044 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1045 return false;
1046 }
1047 }
1048 }
1049 return true;
1050}
1051
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001052static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1053
Chris Lattnerd683bdd2005-08-03 17:59:45 +00001054/// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001055/// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The
1056/// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001057static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001058 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1059 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1060 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1061 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1062 // identical order.
1063 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1064 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1065
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001066 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1067 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1068
1069 Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001070 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1071 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1072 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1073 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1074 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1075 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1076 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1077 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1078 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001079 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001080 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001081 return false;
1082
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001083 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001084
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001085 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001086 do {
1087 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1088 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1089 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1090 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001091
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001092 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1093 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1094 // the now redundant second instruction.
1095 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1096 if (!I2->use_empty())
1097 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001098 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001099 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
1100 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1101 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1102 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001103 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1104 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001105 };
1106 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001107 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001108 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001109
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001110 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001111 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001112 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1113 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1114 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1115 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1116 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1117 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1118 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1119 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1120 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001121 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001122
1123 return true;
1124
1125HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001126 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1127 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001128 return Changed;
1129
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001130 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001131 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001132 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001133 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1134 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1135 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1136 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1137 continue;
1138
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001139 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1140 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1141 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1142 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1143 return Changed;
1144
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001145 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V, DL))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001146 return Changed;
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001147 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V, DL))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001148 return Changed;
1149 }
1150 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001151
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001152 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001153 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001154 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001155 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001156 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1157 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001158 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001159 }
1160
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001161 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001162 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1163 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1164 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1165 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1166 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001167 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001168 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001169 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001170 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001171 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1172 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001173 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001174
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001175 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1176 // that determines the right value.
1177 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001178 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001179 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1180 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1181 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1182
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001183 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1184 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1185 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1186 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001187 }
1188 }
1189
1190 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001191 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1192 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001193
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001194 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001195 return true;
1196}
1197
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001198/// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
1199/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1200/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1201/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1202static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1203 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1204 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1205 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1206
1207 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1208 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001209 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1210 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1211 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001212 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001213 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1214 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1215 return false;
1216 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001217 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1218 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1219 return false;
1220
1221 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001222 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001223 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001224 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001225 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1226 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001227 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001228 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001229 } else {
1230 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1231 break;
1232 }
1233 }
1234 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1235 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001236
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001237 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1238 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1239 // instructions in an identical order.
1240 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001241 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1242 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1243 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001244 // Skip debug info.
1245 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1246 if (RI1 == RE1)
1247 return false;
1248 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1249 if (RI2 == RE2)
1250 return false;
1251 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1252 ++RI1;
1253 ++RI2;
1254
1255 bool Changed = false;
1256 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1257 // Skip debug info.
1258 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1259 if (RI1 == RE1)
1260 return Changed;
1261 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1262 if (RI2 == RE2)
1263 return Changed;
1264
1265 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001266 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001267 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1268 // perform the same operation.
1269 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1270 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1271 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
1272 isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) ||
1273 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1274 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1275 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1276 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001277 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001278 return Changed;
1279
1280 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001281 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001282 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1283 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1284 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1285 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1286 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1287 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1288 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1289 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1290 SwapOpnds = true;
1291 }
1292 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1293 if (SwapOpnds)
1294 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1295 return Changed;
1296 }
1297
1298 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1299 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1300 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001301 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001302 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001303 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1304 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1305 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001306 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1307 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1308 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001309 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1310 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1311 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1312 if (SwapOpnds)
1313 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1314 return Changed;
1315 }
1316 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1317 Op1Idx = I;
1318 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1319 }
1320
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001321 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1322 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1323
1324 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1325 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1326 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1327 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1328 if (!NewPN) {
1329 NewPN =
1330 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
1331 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", BBEnd->begin());
1332 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1333 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1334 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1335 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001336 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1337 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001338 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001339 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1340 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001341
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001342 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1343 // instruction in the basic block down.
1344 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1345 // Sink the instruction.
1346 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1347 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1348 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1349 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1350
1351 if (!I2->use_empty())
1352 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1353 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001354 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1355 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001356 I2->eraseFromParent();
1357
1358 if (UpdateRE1)
1359 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1360 if (UpdateRE2)
1361 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1362 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1;
1363 NumSinkCommons++;
1364 Changed = true;
1365 }
1366 return Changed;
1367}
1368
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001369/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1370/// conditional block.
1371///
1372/// We are looking for code like the following:
1373/// BrBB:
1374/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1375/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1376/// ... // function).
1377/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1378/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1379/// ThenBB:
1380/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1381/// br label EndBB
1382/// EndBB:
1383/// ...
1384/// We are going to transform this into:
1385/// BrBB:
1386/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1387/// ... //
1388/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1389/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1390/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1391/// ...
1392///
1393/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1394/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001395static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1396 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001397 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1398 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001399 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001400
1401 // Volatile or atomic.
1402 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001403 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001404
1405 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1406
1407 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1408 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1409 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1410 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1411 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1412
1413 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1414 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001415 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001416
1417 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1418 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1419 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1420 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1421 return SI->getValueOperand();
1422 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001423 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001424 }
1425
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001426 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001427}
1428
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001429/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001430///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001431/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1432/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1433/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1434/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1435/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1436///
1437/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1438/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1439/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1440/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1441///
1442///
1443/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1444/// \code
1445/// BB:
1446/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1447/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1448/// ThenBB:
1449/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001450/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001451/// EndBB:
1452/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1453/// ...
1454/// \endcode
1455///
1456/// Into this IR:
1457/// \code
1458/// BB:
1459/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1460/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1461/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1462/// ...
1463/// \endcode
1464///
1465/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001466static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001467 const DataLayout *DL,
1468 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001469 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1470 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1471 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1472 return false;
1473
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001474 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1475 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1476
1477 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1478 // to swap the select operands later.
1479 bool Invert = false;
1480 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1481 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1482 Invert = true;
1483 }
1484 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1485
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001486 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1487 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1488 // - They are defined in BB, and
1489 // - They have no side effects, and
1490 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1491 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1492
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001493 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001494 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1495 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001496 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001497 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001498 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
1499 Instruction *I = BBI;
1500 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001501 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1502 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001503
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001504 // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the
1505 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001506 ++SpeculationCost;
1507 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001508 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001509
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001510 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001511 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL) &&
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001512 !(HoistCondStores &&
1513 (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(I, BB, ThenBB,
1514 EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001515 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001516 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001517 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, DL, TTI) > PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1518 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001519 return false;
1520
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001521 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1522 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1523 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1524
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001525 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001526 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001527 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001528 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001529 i != e; ++i) {
1530 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001531 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1532 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1533 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1534
1535 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001536 }
1537 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001538
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001539 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1540 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1541 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1542 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1543 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1544 I != E; ++I)
1545 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001546 ++SpeculationCost;
1547 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001548 return false;
1549 }
1550
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001551 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1552 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001553 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001554 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001555 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1556 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001557
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001558 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001559 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001560 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001561 continue;
1562
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001563 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1564 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1565 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1566 return false;
1567
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001568 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001569 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1570 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1571 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001572 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1573
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001574 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE, DL)) ||
1575 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE, DL)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001576 return false;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001577 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, DL, TTI) : 0;
1578 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, DL, TTI) : 0;
1579 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1580 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1581 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001582 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001583
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001584 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1585 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1586 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001587 // constant expression.
1588 ++SpeculationCost;
1589 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001590 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001591 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001592
1593 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1594 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001595 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001596 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001597
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001598 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001599 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001600
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001601 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1602 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1603 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1604 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1605 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1606 if (Invert)
1607 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1608 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1609 "." + FalseV->getName());
1610 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1611 }
1612
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001613 // Hoist the instructions.
1614 BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001615 std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001616
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001617 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001618 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001619 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1620 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1621 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1622 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1623 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1624 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1625
1626 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1627 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1628 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001629
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001630 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001631 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1632 // destinations were inverted.
1633 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001634 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001635 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1636 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1637 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1638 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1639 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001640 }
1641
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001642 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001643 return true;
1644}
1645
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001646/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1647/// attribute.
1648static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1649 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1650 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1651 if (!CI)
1652 continue;
1653 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1654 return true;
1655 }
1656 return false;
1657}
1658
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001659/// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch
1660/// across this block.
1661static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1662 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001663 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001664
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001665 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001666 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1667 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001668 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001669 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001670
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001671 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001672 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001673 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1674 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1675 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001676 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001677
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001678 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1679 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001680
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001681 return true;
1682}
1683
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001684/// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value
1685/// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are
1686/// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their
1687/// ultimate destination.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001688static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001689 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1690 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001691 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1692 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001693 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1694 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001695
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001696 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1697 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001698 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001699 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001700 }
1701
1702 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001703 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001704
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001705 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1706
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001707 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1708 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001709 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001710 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001711 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001712
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001713 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1714 // branch to RealDest.
1715 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1716 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001717
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001718 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001719 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1720 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001721
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001722 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1723 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1724 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1725 // the edge we are about to create.
1726 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1727 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1728 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1729 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001730
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001731 // Update PHI nodes.
1732 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001733
1734 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1735 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1736 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1737 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1738 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1739 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1740 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1741 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1742 continue;
1743 }
1744 // Clone the instruction.
1745 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1746 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001747
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001748 // Update operands due to translation.
1749 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1750 i != e; ++i) {
1751 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1752 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1753 *i = PI->second;
1754 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001755
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001756 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001757 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001758 TranslateMap[BBI] = V;
1759 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001760 } else {
1761 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1762 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1763 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1764 TranslateMap[BBI] = N;
1765 }
1766 }
1767
1768 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1769 // to EdgeBB instead.
1770 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1771 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1772 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1773 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1774 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1775 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001776
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001777 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001778 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001779 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001780
1781 return false;
1782}
1783
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001784/// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry
1785/// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it.
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001786static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const DataLayout *DL,
1787 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001788 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1789 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1790 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1791 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1792 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1793 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001794 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1795 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1796 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001797 if (!IfCond ||
1798 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1799 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1800 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001801
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001802 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1803 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1804 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1805 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1806 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1807 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1808 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1809 if (NumPhis > 2)
1810 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001811
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001812 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1813 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1814 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001815 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001816 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1817 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001818 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1819 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001820
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001821 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1822 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001823 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001824 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001825 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001826 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001827 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001828
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001829 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001830 MaxCostVal0, DL, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001831 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001832 MaxCostVal1, DL, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001833 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001834 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001835
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001836 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001837 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1838 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001839 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001840
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001841 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1842 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1843 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1844 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1845 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1846 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1847 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001848
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001849 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1850 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1851 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1852 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001853 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001854 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1855 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1856 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001857 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001858 } else {
1859 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1860 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001861 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001862 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1863 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1864 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1865 return false;
1866 }
1867 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001868
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001869 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001870 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001871 } else {
1872 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1873 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001874 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001875 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1876 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1877 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1878 return false;
1879 }
1880 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001881
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001882 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001883 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001884
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001885 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1886 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001887 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001888 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001889
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001890 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1891 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001892 if (IfBlock1)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001893 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001894 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001895 IfBlock1->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001896 if (IfBlock2)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001897 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001898 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001899 IfBlock2->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001900
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001901 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1902 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001903 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1904 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001905
1906 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001907 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001908 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1909 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001910 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001911 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001912
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001913 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1914 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1915 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1916 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001917 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1918 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001919 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001920 return true;
1921}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001922
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001923/// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes
1924/// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return,
1925/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001926static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001927 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001928 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1929 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1930 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1931 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1932 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001933
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001934 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1935 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1936 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001937 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001938 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001939 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001940 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001941
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001942 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001943 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1944 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1945 // branch into a return.
1946 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1947 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1948 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001949 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001950 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001951 return true;
1952 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001953
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001954 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1955 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1956 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1957 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001958
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001959 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1960 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1961 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1962 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1963 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1964 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1965 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001966
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001967 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1968 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1969 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1970 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1971 // safe.
1972 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1973 if (TCV->canTrap())
1974 return false;
1975 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1976 if (FCV->canTrap())
1977 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001978
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001979 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1980 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1981 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1982 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001983
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001984 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1985 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001986 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001987 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001988 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1989 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
1990 TrueValue = FalseValue;
1991 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001992 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
1993 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001994 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001995 }
1996
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001997 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001998 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
1999
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00002000 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002001
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002002 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002003 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
2004 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002005
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002006 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2007
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002008 return true;
2009}
2010
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002011/// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the
2012/// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt
2013/// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was
2014/// found.
2015static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
2016 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
2017 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
2018 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
2019 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
2020 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00002021 ConstantInt *CITrue =
2022 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
2023 ConstantInt *CIFalse =
2024 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002025 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
2026 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
2027 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
2028 return true;
2029}
2030
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002031/// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available
2032/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
2033///
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002034static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002035 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2036 return false;
2037 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2038 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2039 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2040 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2041 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2042 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2043 return true;
2044 }
2045 }
2046 return false;
2047}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002048
Chris Lattner7d4cdae2011-04-11 23:24:57 +00002049/// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a
2050/// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into
2051/// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002052bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL,
2053 unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002054 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002055
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002056 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002057 if (BI->isConditional())
2058 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2059 else {
2060 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2061 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2062 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2063 // predecessor.
2064 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2065 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2066 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2067 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2068 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2069 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2070 I != E; ) {
2071 Instruction *Curr = I++;
2072 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2073 Cond = Curr;
2074 break;
2075 }
2076 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2077 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2078 return false;
2079 }
2080 }
2081
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002082 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002083 return false;
2084 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002085
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002086 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2087 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002088 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002089
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002090 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
2091 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002092
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002093 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002094 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002095
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002096 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002097 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002098
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002099 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2100 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2101 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2102 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2103 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2104 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2105 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2106 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2107 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2108 continue;
2109 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL))
2110 return false;
2111 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2112 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2113 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2114 return false;
2115 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2116 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2117 // and Cond.
2118 ++NumBonusInsts;
2119 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2120 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2121 return false;
2122 }
2123
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002124 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2125 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2126 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2127 if (CE->canTrap())
2128 return false;
2129 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2130 if (CE->canTrap())
2131 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002133 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2134 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002135 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002136 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2137 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002138
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002139 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2140 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002141 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002142
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002143 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2144 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2145 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002146 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002147 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002148 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002149 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2150 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2151 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002152 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002153
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002154 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002155 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002156 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002157
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002158 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2159 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2160 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2161 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2162 Opc = Instruction::And;
2163 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2164 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2165 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2166 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2167 else
2168 continue;
2169 } else {
2170 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2171 continue;
2172 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002173
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002174 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002176
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002177 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2178 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002179 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002180
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002181 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2182 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2183 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2184 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002185 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002186 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002187 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002188
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002189 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002190 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002191 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002192
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002193 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
2194 // Note that there may be mutliple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
2195 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2196 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2197 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
2198 // every instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
2199 // instructions.
2200 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2201 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2202 continue;
2203 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2204 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2205 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
2206 VMap[BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002207
2208 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2209 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2210 // only given the branch precondition.
2211 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2212 // semantics we don't understand.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002213 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_dbg);
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002214
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002215 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonusInst);
2216 NewBonusInst->takeName(BonusInst);
2217 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002218 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002220 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2221 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002222 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002223 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2224 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002225 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New);
2226 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002227 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002228
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002229 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002230 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002231 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002232 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002233 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2234
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002235 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002236 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2237 PredFalseWeight);
2238 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2239 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002240 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2241
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002242 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002243 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2244 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2245 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2246 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2247 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2248 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2249 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2250 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2251 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2252 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2253 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2254 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002255 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2256 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2257 }
2258 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002259 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2260 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2261 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2262 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2263 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2264 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2265 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2266 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2267 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2268 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002269 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2270 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2271 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002272 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2273 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2274 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2275
2276 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2277 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2278 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2279 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2280 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002281 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002282 } else {
2283 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2284 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002285 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002286 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2287 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002288 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002289 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2290 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2291 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2292 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2293 Instruction *NotCond =
2294 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2295 "not.cond"));
2296 MergedCond =
2297 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2298 NotCond, New,
2299 "and.cond"));
2300 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2301 MergedCond =
2302 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2303 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2304 "or.cond"));
2305 } else {
2306 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2307 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2308 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002309 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002310 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2311 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2312 "and.cond"));
2313 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2314 Instruction *NotCond =
2315 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2316 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002317 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002318 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2319 NotCond, MergedCond,
2320 "or.cond"));
2321 }
2322 }
2323 // Update PHI Node.
2324 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2325 MergedCond);
2326 }
2327 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2328 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2329 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2330 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002331 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002332
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002333 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2334 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2335
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002336 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2337 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2338 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2339 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002340
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002341 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002342 }
2343 return false;
2344}
2345
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002346/// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a
2347/// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know
2348/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2349/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
2350static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) {
2351 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2352 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002353
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002354 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002355 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002356 // this conditional branch redundant.
2357 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2358 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2359 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2360 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2361 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2362 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2363 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002364 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002365 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002366 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2367 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002368
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002369 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2370 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2371 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2372 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002373 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002374 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Jay Foad52131342011-03-30 11:28:46 +00002375 std::distance(PB, PE),
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002376 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr",
2377 BB->begin());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002378 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2379 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2380 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002381 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002382 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2383 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002384 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2385 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2386 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2387 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002388 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002389 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002390 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002391 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002392 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002393 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002394
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002395 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002396 return true;
2397 }
2398 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002399
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002400 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002401 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002402 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002403 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2404 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2405 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2406 ++BBI;
2407 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002408 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002409
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002410
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002411 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2412 if (CE->canTrap())
2413 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002414
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002415 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2416 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2417 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2418 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2419 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2420 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2421 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2422 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2423 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2424 else
2425 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002426
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002427 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2428 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2429 // keep getting unwound.
2430 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2431 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002432
2433 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002434 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2435 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002436
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002437 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2438 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2439 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2440
2441 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002442 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2443 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002444 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002445 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2446 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002447
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002448 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2449 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2450 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2451 if (CE->canTrap())
2452 return false;
2453
2454 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2455 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2456 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2457 if (CE->canTrap())
2458 return false;
2459 }
2460
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002461 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002462 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002463
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002464 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002465 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002466
2467
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002468 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2469 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2470 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2471 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2472 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2473 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2474 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2475 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2476 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2477 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002478 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2479 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002480 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2481 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002482 }
2483
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002484 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002485
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002486 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2487 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002488
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002489 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2490 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002491 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002492 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002493 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2494
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002495 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2496 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002497 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2498
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002499 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002500 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002501
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002502 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2503 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2504 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2505 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002506
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002507 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2508 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002509 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2510 PredFalseWeight);
2511 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2512 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002513 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2514 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2515 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2516 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2517 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2518 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2519 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2520 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
2521 SmallVector<uint64_t, 2> NewWeights;
2522 NewWeights.push_back(PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2523 PredOther * SuccCommon);
2524 NewWeights.push_back(PredOther * SuccOther);
2525 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2526 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2527
2528 SmallVector<uint32_t, 2> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2529 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2530 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2531 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2532 }
2533
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002534 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2535 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002536 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002537
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002538 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2539 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2540 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2541 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002542 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002543 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2544 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2545 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2546 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2547 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2548 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2549 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002550 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2551 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002552 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002553 }
2554 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002555
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002556 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2557 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002558
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002559 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2560 // one fewer predecessor.
2561 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002562}
2563
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002564// SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a
2565// branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
2566// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2567// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2568// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2569static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002570 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2571 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2572 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002573 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2574 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2575 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2576 // successor.
2577 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002578 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002579
2580 // Then remove the rest.
2581 for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) {
2582 BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I);
2583 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2584 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002585 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002586 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002587 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002588 else
2589 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent());
2590 }
2591
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002592 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2593 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2594
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002595 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002596 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002597 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2598 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2599 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002600 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002601 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002602 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2603 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002604 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2605 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2606 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2607 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2608 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2609 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002610 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2611 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2612 // terminator must be unreachable.
2613 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2614 } else {
2615 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2616 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2617 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002618 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002619 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002620 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002621 else
2622 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002623 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002624 }
2625
2626 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2627 return true;
2628}
2629
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002630// SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces
2631// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2632// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2633// unconditional otherwise.
2634static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2635 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2636 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2637 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2638 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2639 return false;
2640
2641 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2642 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002643 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2644 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002645
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002646 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2647 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2648 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2649 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2650 if (HasWeights) {
2651 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2652 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2653 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2654 getSuccessorIndex()];
2655 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2656 getSuccessorIndex()];
2657 }
2658 }
2659
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002660 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002661 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2662 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002663}
2664
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002665// SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces
2666// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2667// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2668// with
2669// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2670static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2671 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2672 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2673 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2674 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2675 return false;
2676
2677 // Extract the actual blocks.
2678 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2679 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2680
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002681 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002682 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2683 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002684}
2685
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002686/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp
2687/// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
2688/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2689/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2690/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2691/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2692/// like:
2693///
2694/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2695/// DEFAULT:
2696/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
2697/// br label %end
2698/// end:
2699/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002700///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002701/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
2702/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00002703static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
2704 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00002705 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002706 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002707
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002708 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
2709 // complex.
2710 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
2711
2712 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
2713 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002714
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002715 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
2716 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
2717 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
2718 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002719 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002720
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002721 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
2722 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
2723 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002724
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002725 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
2726 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
2727 // away.
2728 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
2729 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
2730 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
2731 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002732
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002733 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002734 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002735 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2736 }
2737 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00002738 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002739 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002740
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002741 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
2742 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
2743 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00002744 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002745 Value *V;
2746 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2747 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2748 else
2749 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002750
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002751 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2752 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2753 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00002754 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002755 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002756
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002757 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
2758 // the block.
2759 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002760 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002761 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002762 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
2763 return false;
2764
2765 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
2766 // true in the PHI.
2767 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
2768 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2769
2770 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2771 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
2772
2773 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
2774 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
2775 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
2776 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2777
2778 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
2779 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
2780 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
2781 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00002782 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2783 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2784 if (HasWeights) {
2785 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2786 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2787 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
2788 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
2789 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
2790
2791 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
2792 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2793 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
2794 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2795 }
2796 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002797 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002798
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002799 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002800 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
2801 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
2802 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002803 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
2804 return true;
2805}
2806
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002807/// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch.
2808/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
2809/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002810static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL,
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002811 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002812 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002813 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002814
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002815 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
2816 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
2817 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002818
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00002819 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00002820 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
2821 // Unpack the result
2822 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
2823 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
2824 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
2825 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002826
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002827 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002828 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002829
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002830 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
2831 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
2832 return false;
2833
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00002834 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
2835
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002836 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
2837 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
2838 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
2839 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002840
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002841 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
2842 // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch.
2843 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002844
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00002845 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
2846 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
2847
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002848 // Figure out which block is which destination.
2849 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2850 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2851 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002852
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002853 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002854
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002855 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002856 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002857
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002858 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
2859 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
2860 // right before the condbr to handle it.
2861 if (ExtraCase) {
2862 BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test");
2863 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
2864 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002865 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2866
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002867 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002868 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002869 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002870 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002871
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002872 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002873
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00002874 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
2875 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002876 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002877
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002878 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
2879 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002880 BB = NewBB;
2881 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002882
2883 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002884 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
2885 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002886 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002887 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CompVal,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002888 DL->getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()),
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002889 "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002890 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002891
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002892 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002893 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00002894
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002895 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
2896 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
2897 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002898
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002899 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
2900 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
2901 // the number of edges added.
2902 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
2903 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
2904 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
2905 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2906 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
2907 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
2908 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002909
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002910 // Erase the old branch instruction.
2911 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002912
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002913 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002914 return true;
2915}
2916
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002917bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2918 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
2919 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
2920 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2921 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2922 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
2923 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
2924 // caused control to branch here.
2925 return false;
2926
2927 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2928 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI;
2929 while (++I != E)
2930 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2931 return false;
2932
2933 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002934 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
2935 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator());
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002936 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3);
2937 // Insert a call instruction before the invoke.
2938 CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II);
2939 Call->takeName(II);
2940 Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
2941 Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
2942 Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc());
2943
2944 // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses
2945 // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even
2946 // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is
2947 // updated.
2948 II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call);
2949 BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2950
2951 // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke.
2952 BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II);
2953
2954 // Finally, delete the invoke instruction!
2955 II->eraseFromParent();
2956 }
2957
Reid Klecknerf12b3342015-01-22 19:29:46 +00002958 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
2959 BB->eraseFromParent();
2960 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002961}
2962
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002963bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002964 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2965 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002966
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002967 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
2968 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
2969 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002970 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2971 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002972 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
2973 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
2974 if (BI->isUnconditional())
2975 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
2976 else
2977 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
2978 }
2979 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002980
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002981 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002982 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002983 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2984 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
2985 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
2986 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002987 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002988 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002989
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002990 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00002991 if (pred_empty(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002992 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
2993 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002994
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002995 return true;
2996 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002997
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002998 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
2999 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3000 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3001 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3002 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003003
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003004 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3005 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3006 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003007 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003008 return true;
3009 }
3010 return false;
3011}
3012
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003013bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3014 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003015
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003016 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003017
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003018 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3019 // be removed, do so.
3020 while (UI != BB->begin()) {
3021 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI;
3022 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003023 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3024 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3025 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003026 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003027
3028 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
3029 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
3030 if (SI->isVolatile())
3031 break;
3032 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
3033 if (LI->isVolatile())
3034 break;
3035 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3036 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3037 break;
3038 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3039 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3040 break;
3041 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3042 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003043 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003044 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003045 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3046 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3047 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3048 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003049 }
3050
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003051 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3052 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3053 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003054 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003055 Changed = true;
3056 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003057
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003058 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3059 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3060 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003061
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003062 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3063 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3064 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003065 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003066 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3067 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3068 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3069 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3070 TI->eraseFromParent();
3071 Changed = true;
3072 }
3073 } else {
3074 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003075 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003076 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3077 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003078 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003079 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3080 Changed = true;
3081 }
3082 }
3083 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003084 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003085 i != e; ++i)
3086 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003087 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3088 SI->removeCase(i);
3089 --i; --e;
3090 Changed = true;
3091 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003092 } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3093 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3094 // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good
3095 // place to note that the call does not throw though.
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003096 BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003097 II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003098
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003099 // Insert the call now...
3100 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3);
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003101 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
3102 CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(),
Jay Foad5bd375a2011-07-15 08:37:34 +00003103 Args, II->getName());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003104 CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
3105 CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
3106 // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead.
3107 II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI);
3108 delete II;
3109 Changed = true;
3110 }
3111 }
3112 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003113
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003114 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003115 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003116 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3117 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3118 BB->eraseFromParent();
3119 return true;
3120 }
3121
3122 return Changed;
3123}
3124
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003125static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3126 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3127
3128 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3129 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3130 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3131 return false;
3132 }
3133 return true;
3134}
3135
3136/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3137/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003138static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003139 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003140
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003141 bool HasDefault =
3142 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003143
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003144 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3145 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3146 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3147 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3148 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3149
3150 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3151 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3152 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3153 if (Dest == DestA) {
3154 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3155 continue;
3156 }
3157 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3158 if (Dest == DestB) {
3159 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3160 continue;
3161 }
3162 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003163 }
3164
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003165 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3166 assert(DestA != DestB);
3167 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3168 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3169 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3170
3171 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3172 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3173 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3174 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3175 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3176 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3177 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3178 OtherDest = DestB;
3179 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3180 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3181 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3182 OtherDest = DestA;
3183 } else
3184 return false;
3185
3186 // Start building the compare and branch.
3187
3188 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3189 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003190
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003191 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3192 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003193 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3194
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003195 Value *Cmp;
3196 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003197 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003198 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3199 else
3200 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003201 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003202
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003203 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003204 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3205 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003206 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3207 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003208 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3209 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3210 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3211 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3212 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3213 else
3214 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3215 }
3216 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3217 TrueWeight /= 2;
3218 FalseWeight /= 2;
3219 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003220 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003221 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3222 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003223 }
3224 }
3225
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003226 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3227 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3228 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3229 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3230 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003231 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3232 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003233 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3234 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3235 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3236 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3237 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3238 }
3239
3240 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003241 SI->eraseFromParent();
3242
3243 return true;
3244}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003245
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003246/// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
3247/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Hal Finkel60db0582014-09-07 18:57:58 +00003248static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, const DataLayout *DL,
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003249 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003250 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003251 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003252 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003253 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003254
3255 // Gather dead cases.
3256 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003257 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003258 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3259 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3260 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003261 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003262 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003263 }
3264 }
3265
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003266 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3267 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3268 if (HasWeight) {
3269 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3270 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3271 }
3272
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003273 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3274 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003275 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003276 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003277 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003278 if (HasWeight) {
3279 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3280 Weights.pop_back();
3281 }
3282
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003283 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003284 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003285 SI->removeCase(Case);
3286 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003287 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003288 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3289 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3290 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3291 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3292 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003293
3294 return !DeadCases.empty();
3295}
3296
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003297/// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification
3298/// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
3299/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3300/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3301/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3302static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3303 BasicBlock *BB,
3304 int *PhiIndex) {
3305 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003306 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003307 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003308 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003309
3310 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3311 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003312 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003313
3314 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3315
3316 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3317 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3318 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3319 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3320
3321 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3322 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3323
3324 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3325 return PHI;
3326 }
3327
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003328 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003329}
3330
3331/// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch
3332/// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that
3333/// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away.
3334/// Returns true if a change is made.
3335static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3336 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3337 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3338
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003339 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003340 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3341 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003342
3343 int PhiIndex;
3344 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3345 &PhiIndex);
3346 if (!PHI) continue;
3347
3348 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3349 }
3350
3351 bool Changed = false;
3352
3353 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3354 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3355 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003356 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003357
3358 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3359
3360 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3361 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3362 Changed = true;
3363 }
3364
3365 return Changed;
3366}
3367
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003368/// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle
3369/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003370static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003371 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3372 return false;
3373 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3374 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003375
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003376 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3377 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3378
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003379 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3380 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3381 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3382 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3383 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3384}
3385
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003386/// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003387/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003388static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3389 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3390 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3391 return C;
3392 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3393}
3394
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003395/// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
3396/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3397/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003398/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003399static Constant *
3400ConstantFold(Instruction *I,
3401 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool,
3402 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003403 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003404 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3405 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003406 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003407 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3408 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3409 if (A->isNullValue())
3410 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003411 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003412 }
3413
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003414 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3415 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3416 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3417 COps.push_back(A);
3418 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003419 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003420 }
3421
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003422 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
3423 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3424 COps[1], DL);
3425
3426 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003427}
3428
3429/// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
3430/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003431/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003432/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003433static bool
3434GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI,
3435 ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3436 BasicBlock *CaseDest,
3437 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003438 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *> > &Res,
3439 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003440 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3441 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3442
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003443 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3444 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3445 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3446 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3447 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3448 ++I) {
3449 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3450 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3451 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3452 return false;
3453 Pred = CaseDest;
3454 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3455 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3456 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3457 continue;
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003458 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, ConstantPool, DL)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003459 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00003460
3461 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
3462 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
3463 // no longer dominate all its uses.
3464 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
3465 User *User = Use.getUser();
3466 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
3467 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
3468 continue;
3469 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
3470 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
3471 continue;
3472 return false;
3473 }
3474
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003475 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C));
3476 } else {
3477 break;
3478 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003479 }
3480
3481 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3482 if (!*CommonDest)
3483 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3484 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3485 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3486 return false;
3487
3488 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3489 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3490 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3491 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3492 if (Idx == -1)
3493 continue;
3494
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003495 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3496 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003497 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003498 return false;
3499
3500 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3501 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3502 return false;
3503
3504 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3505 }
3506
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003507 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003508}
3509
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003510// MapCaseToResult - Helper function used to
3511// add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate Result.
3512static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3513 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3514 Constant *Result) {
3515 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
3516 if (I.first == Result) {
3517 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
3518 return;
3519 }
3520 }
3521 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
3522 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
3523}
3524
3525// InitializeUniqueCases - Helper function that initializes a map containing
3526// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
3527// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
3528// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
3529static bool InitializeUniqueCases(
3530 SwitchInst *SI, const DataLayout *DL, PHINode *&PHI,
3531 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
3532 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3533 Constant *&DefaultResult) {
3534 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
3535 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
3536
3537 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3538 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
3539 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
3540 DL))
3541 return false;
3542
3543 // Only one value per case is permitted
3544 if (Results.size() > 1)
3545 return false;
3546 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
3547
3548 // Check the PHI consistency.
3549 if (!PHI)
3550 PHI = Results[0].first;
3551 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
3552 return false;
3553 }
3554 // Find the default result value.
3555 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
3556 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
3557 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
3558 DL);
3559 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
3560 // is unreachable.
3561 DefaultResult =
3562 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
3563 if ((!DefaultResult &&
3564 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
3565 return false;
3566
3567 return true;
3568}
3569
3570// ConvertTwoCaseSwitch - Helper function that checks if it is possible to
3571// transform a switch with only two cases (or two cases + default)
3572// that produces a result into a value select.
3573// Example:
3574// switch (a) {
3575// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
3576// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
3577// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
3578// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
3579// default:
3580// return 4;
3581// }
3582static Value *
3583ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
3584 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
3585 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3586 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
3587 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
3588 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
3589 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
3590 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
3591 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
3592 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
3593 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
3594
3595 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
3596 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
3597 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
3598 Value *const ValueCompare =
3599 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3600 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
3601 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
3602 }
3603 Value *const ValueCompare =
3604 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3605 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
3606 "switch.select");
3607 }
3608
3609 return nullptr;
3610}
3611
3612// RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion - Helper function to cleanup a switch
3613// instruction that has been converted into a select, fixing up PHI nodes and
3614// basic blocks.
3615static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
3616 Value *SelectValue,
3617 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3618 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
3619 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
3620 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
3621 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
3622
3623 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
3624
3625 // Remove the switch.
3626 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
3627 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
3628
3629 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
3630 continue;
3631 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
3632 }
3633 SI->eraseFromParent();
3634}
3635
3636/// SwitchToSelect - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
3637/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
3638/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
3639static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003640 const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionCache *AC) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003641 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
3642 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
3643 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
3644 Constant *DefaultResult;
3645 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
3646 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
3647 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, DL, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults,
3648 DefaultResult))
3649 return false;
3650 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
3651 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
3652 return false;
3653 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
3654
3655 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3656 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
3657 UniqueResults,
3658 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
3659 if (SelectValue) {
3660 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
3661 return true;
3662 }
3663 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
3664 return false;
3665}
3666
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003667namespace {
3668 /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used
3669 /// to replace a switch.
3670 class SwitchLookupTable {
3671 public:
3672 /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement
3673 /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the
3674 /// table.
3675 SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3676 uint64_t TableSize,
3677 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003678 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003679 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003680 const DataLayout *DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003681
3682 /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
3683 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003684 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003685
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003686 /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
3687 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003688 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003689 uint64_t TableSize,
3690 const Type *ElementType);
3691
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003692 private:
3693 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
3694 // different ways.
3695 enum {
3696 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
3697 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
3698 SingleValueKind,
3699
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003700 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
3701 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
3702 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
3703 LinearMapKind,
3704
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003705 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
3706 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
3707 // shift and mask operations.
3708 BitMapKind,
3709
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003710 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
3711 // instructions from the table.
3712 ArrayKind
3713 } Kind;
3714
3715 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
3716 Constant *SingleValue;
3717
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003718 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
3719 ConstantInt *BitMap;
3720 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
3721
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003722 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
3723 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
3724 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
3725
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003726 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
3727 GlobalVariable *Array;
3728 };
3729}
3730
3731SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3732 uint64_t TableSize,
3733 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003734 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003735 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003736 const DataLayout *DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003737 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003738 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003739 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
3740 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003741
3742 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003743 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003744
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003745 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
3746
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003747 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003748 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
3749 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3750 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
3751 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003752 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003753
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003754 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
3755 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003756 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
3757
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003758 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003759 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003760 }
3761
3762 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003763 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00003764 assert(DefaultValue &&
3765 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003766 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003767 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3768 if (!TableContents[I])
3769 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003770 }
3771
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003772 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003773 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003774 }
3775
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003776 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
3777 // that single value.
3778 if (SingleValue) {
3779 Kind = SingleValueKind;
3780 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003781 }
3782
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003783 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
3784 // table index.
3785 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
3786 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
3787 APInt PrevVal;
3788 APInt DistToPrev;
3789 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
3790 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
3791 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3792 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
3793 if (!ConstVal) {
3794 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
3795 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
3796 LinearMappingPossible = false;
3797 break;
3798 }
3799 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
3800 if (I != 0) {
3801 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
3802 if (I == 1) {
3803 DistToPrev = Dist;
3804 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
3805 LinearMappingPossible = false;
3806 break;
3807 }
3808 }
3809 PrevVal = Val;
3810 }
3811 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
3812 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
3813 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
3814 Kind = LinearMapKind;
3815 ++NumLinearMaps;
3816 return;
3817 }
3818 }
3819
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003820 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003821 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003822 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003823 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
3824 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
3825 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00003826 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
3827 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
3828 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
3829 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
3830 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003831 }
3832 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
3833 BitMapElementTy = IT;
3834 Kind = BitMapKind;
3835 ++NumBitMaps;
3836 return;
3837 }
3838
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003839 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003840 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003841 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
3842
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003843 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
3844 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
3845 Initializer,
3846 "switch.table");
3847 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
3848 Kind = ArrayKind;
3849}
3850
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003851Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003852 switch (Kind) {
3853 case SingleValueKind:
3854 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003855 case LinearMapKind: {
3856 // Derive the result value from the input value.
3857 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
3858 false, "switch.idx.cast");
3859 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
3860 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
3861 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
3862 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
3863 return Result;
3864 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003865 case BitMapKind: {
3866 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
3867 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
3868
3869 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
3870 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
3871 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00003872 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003873
3874 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
3875 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
3876 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
3877 "switch.shiftamt");
3878
3879 // Shift down.
3880 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
3881 "switch.downshift");
3882 // Mask off.
3883 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
3884 "switch.masked");
3885 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003886 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003887 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003888 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
3889 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
3890 ->getArrayNumElements();
3891 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
3892 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
3893 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
3894 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
3895 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003896
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003897 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
3898 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices,
3899 "switch.gep");
3900 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
3901 }
3902 }
3903 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
3904}
3905
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003906bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003907 uint64_t TableSize,
3908 const Type *ElementType) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003909 if (!DL)
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003910 return false;
3911 const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
3912 if (!IT)
3913 return false;
3914 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
3915 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00003916
3917 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
3918 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
3919 return false;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003920 return DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003921}
3922
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003923/// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built
Hans Wennborg5cf30be2013-06-04 11:22:30 +00003924/// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003925/// types of the results.
3926static bool ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003927 uint64_t TableSize,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003928 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003929 const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003930 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>& ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003931 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
3932 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003933
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003934 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003935 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00003936 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
3937 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003938
3939 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003940 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003941
3942 // Saturate this flag to false.
3943 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003944 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003945
3946 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
3947 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
3948 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
3949 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003950 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003951 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003952
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003953 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
3954 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
3955 return true;
3956
3957 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
3958 if (HasIllegalType)
3959 return false;
3960
3961 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
3962 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
3963 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
3964 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003965}
3966
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00003967/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
3968/// \code
3969/// if (idx < tablesize)
3970/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
3971/// else
3972/// r = default_value;
3973/// if (r != default_value)
3974/// ...
3975/// \endcode
3976/// Is optimized to:
3977/// \code
3978/// cond = idx < tablesize;
3979/// if (cond)
3980/// r = table[idx];
3981/// else
3982/// r = default_value;
3983/// if (cond)
3984/// ...
3985/// \endcode
3986/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
3987static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
3988 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
3989 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
3990
3991 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
3992 if (!CmpInst)
3993 return;
3994
3995 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
3996 // threading can do its work afterwards.
3997 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
3998 return;
3999
4000 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4001 if (!CmpOp1)
4002 return;
4003
4004 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4005 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4006 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4007
4008 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4009 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4010 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4011 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4012 return;
4013
4014 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4015 // compare result.
4016 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4017 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4018 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4019 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4020 return;
4021 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4022 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4023 }
4024
4025 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4026 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4027 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4028 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4029 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4030 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4031 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4032 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4033 return;
4034 }
4035
4036 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4037 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4038 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4039 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4040 } else {
4041 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4042 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4043 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4044 RangeCheckBranch);
4045 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4046 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4047 }
4048}
4049
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004050/// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
4051/// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values,
4052/// replace the switch with lookup tables.
4053static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004054 IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004055 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004056 const DataLayout* DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004057 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004058
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004059 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004060 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004061 return false;
4062
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004063 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4064 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4065
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004066 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4067 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4068 // string and lookup indices into that.
4069
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004070 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4071 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4072 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004073 return false;
4074
4075 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
4076 // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values.
4077 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4078 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4079 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4080 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4081
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004082 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004083 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004084 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4085 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4086 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4087 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4088
4089 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4090 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4091 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4092 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4093 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4094 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4095
4096 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4097 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4098 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004099 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004100 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004101 return false;
4102
4103 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004104 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4105 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4106 Constant *Value = I.second;
4107 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4108 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4109 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004110 }
4111 }
4112
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004113 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004114 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004115 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4116 }
4117
4118 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4119 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4120 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4121 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4122
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004123 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4124 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004125 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004126 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004127 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004128
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004129 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4130 if (NeedMask) {
4131 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4132 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4133 return false;
4134 if (!(DL && DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize)))
4135 return false;
4136 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004137
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004138 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4139 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4140 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004141 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004142 }
4143
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004144 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004145 return false;
4146
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004147 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004148 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004149 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4150 "switch.lookup",
4151 CommonDest->getParent(),
4152 CommonDest);
4153
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004154 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004155 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4156 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4157 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004158
4159 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4160 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004161 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004162 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004163 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4164 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4165 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4166
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004167 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4168 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4169 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4170 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4171 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4172 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004173 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4174
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004175 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004176 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Manman Ren062f58d2014-08-02 23:41:54 +00004177 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4178 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4179 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004180 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004181 } else {
4182 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004183 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004184 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004185 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004186
4187 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4188 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004189
4190 if (NeedMask) {
4191 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4192 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4193 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4194 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4195 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4196 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4197 "switch.lookup",
4198 CommonDest->getParent(),
4199 CommonDest);
4200
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004201 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4202 // unnecessary illegal types.
4203 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4204 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4205 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004206 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004207 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4208 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4209 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4210 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4211 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4212 }
4213 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4214
4215 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4216 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4217 // else continue with table lookup.
4218 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4219 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4220 "switch.maskindex");
4221 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4222 "switch.shifted");
4223 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4224 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4225 "switch.lobit");
4226 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4227
4228 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4229 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4230 }
4231
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004232 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004233 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4234 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004235 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004236
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004237 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4238 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004239 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004240
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004241 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004242
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004243 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4244 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004245 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4246 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004247 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4248 ReturnedEarly = true;
4249 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004250 }
4251
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004252 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4253 // possible.
4254 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4255 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4256 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4257 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4258 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4259 }
4260 }
4261
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004262 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004263 }
4264
4265 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4266 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4267
4268 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004269 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004270 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004271
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004272 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004273 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004274 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4275 }
4276 SI->eraseFromParent();
4277
4278 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004279 if (NeedMask)
4280 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004281 return true;
4282}
4283
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004284bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004285 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4286
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004287 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4288 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4289 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4290 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4291 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004292 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004293
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004294 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4295 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4296 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004297 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004298
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004299 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4300 // away into any preds.
4301 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4302 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4303 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4304 ++BBI;
4305 if (SI == &*BBI)
4306 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004307 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004308 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004309
4310 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004311 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004312 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004313
4314 // Remove unreachable cases.
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004315 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DL, AC))
4316 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004317
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004318 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, AC))
4319 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004320
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004321 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004322 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004323
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004324 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, TTI, DL))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004325 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004326
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004327 return false;
4328}
4329
4330bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4331 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4332 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004333
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004334 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4335 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4336 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4337 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004338 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004339 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4340 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4341 --i; --e;
4342 Changed = true;
4343 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004344 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004345
4346 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4347 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4348 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4349 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4350 return true;
4351 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004352
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004353 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4354 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4355 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4356 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4357 return true;
4358 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004359
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004360 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4361 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004362 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004363 }
4364 return Changed;
4365}
4366
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004367bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004368 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004369
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00004370 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
4371 return true;
4372
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004373 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Rafael Espindolad07cf402014-07-30 21:04:00 +00004374 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004375 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4376 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4377 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004378
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004379 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4380 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4381 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4382 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4383 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4384 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004385 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004386 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, TTI,
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004387 BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004388 return true;
4389 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004390
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004391 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4392 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4393 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4394 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004395 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DL, BonusInstThreshold))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004396 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004397 return false;
4398}
4399
4400
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004401bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004402 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004403
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004404 // Conditional branch
4405 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4406 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4407 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4408 // switch.
4409 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004410 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004411 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004412
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004413 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4414 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4415 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4416 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4417 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4418 ++I;
4419 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004420 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004421 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004422 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4423 ++I;
4424 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4425 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4426 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004427 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004428 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004429 }
4430 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004431
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004432 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004433 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, DL, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004434 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004435
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004436 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4437 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4438 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004439 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DL, BonusInstThreshold))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004440 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004441
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004442 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4443 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4444 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4445 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004446 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4447 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004448 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, DL))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004449 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004450 } else {
4451 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004452 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004453 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4454 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4455 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00004456 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), DL, TTI))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004457 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004458 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004459 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004460 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004461 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004462 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4463 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4464 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00004465 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), DL, TTI))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004466 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004467 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004468
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004469 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4470 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4471 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4472 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004473 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004474 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004475
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004476 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004477 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4478 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004479 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4480 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI))
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004481 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004482
4483 return false;
4484}
4485
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004486/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4487static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4488 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4489 if (!C)
4490 return false;
4491
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004492 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004493 return false;
4494
4495 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004496 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004497 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004498
4499 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
4500 // control flow (eg. calls)
4501 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004502 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004503 return false;
4504
4505 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
4506 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
4507 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
4508 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
4509
4510 // Look through bitcasts.
4511 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
4512 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
4513
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004514 // Load from null is undefined.
4515 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004516 if (!LI->isVolatile())
4517 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004518
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004519 // Store to null is undefined.
4520 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004521 if (!SI->isVolatile())
4522 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004523 }
4524 return false;
4525}
4526
4527/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004528/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004529static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
4530 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
4531 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
4532 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
4533 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
4534 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
4535 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
4536 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
4537 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
4538 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
4539 // destination from conditional branches.
4540 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4541 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4542 else
4543 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
4544 BI->getSuccessor(0));
4545 BI->eraseFromParent();
4546 return true;
4547 }
4548 // TODO: SwitchInst.
4549 }
4550
4551 return false;
4552}
4553
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004554bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00004555 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004556
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004557 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004558 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004559
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004560 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
4561 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00004562 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004563 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004564 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00004565 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00004566 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004567 return true;
4568 }
4569
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004570 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
4571 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00004572 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004573
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00004574 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
4575 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
4576
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004577 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
4578 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
4579
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00004580 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
4581 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
4582 // if there are no PHI nodes.
4583 //
4584 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
4585 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004586
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00004587 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
4588
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004589 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
4590 // eliminate it, do so now.
4591 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
4592 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00004593 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, DL, TTI);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004594
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004595 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004596 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004597 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004598 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004599 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004600 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004601 }
4602 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004603 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00004604 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4605 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004606 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004607 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004608 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
4609 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4610 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004611 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
4612 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4613 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00004614 }
4615
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004616 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004617}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004618
4619/// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For
4620/// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it
4621/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
4622/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
4623///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004624bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004625 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, const DataLayout *DL,
4626 AssumptionCache *AC) {
4627 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AC).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004628}